6782 lines
211 KiB
C
6782 lines
211 KiB
C
|
/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
|
||
|
|* *|
|
||
|
|* Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM *|
|
||
|
|* Exceptions. *|
|
||
|
|* See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. *|
|
||
|
|* SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception *|
|
||
|
|* *|
|
||
|
|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
|
||
|
|* *|
|
||
|
|* This header provides a public interface to a Clang library for extracting *|
|
||
|
|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
|
||
|
|* Clang C++ API. *|
|
||
|
|* *|
|
||
|
\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
|
||
|
#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
|
||
|
|
||
|
#include <time.h>
|
||
|
|
||
|
#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
|
||
|
#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
|
||
|
#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
|
||
|
#include "clang-c/ExternC.h"
|
||
|
#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The version constants for the libclang API.
|
||
|
* CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
|
||
|
* CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
|
||
|
* compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 61
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) (((major)*10000) + ((minor)*1))
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION \
|
||
|
CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) #major "." #minor
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
|
||
|
CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING \
|
||
|
CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
|
||
|
|
||
|
LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_BEGIN
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
|
||
|
* facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
|
||
|
* loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
|
||
|
* physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
|
||
|
* facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
|
||
|
* representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
|
||
|
* maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
|
||
|
* providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
|
||
|
* functions are prefixed with "clang_".
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
|
||
|
* typically be linked together into an executable or library.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXIndex;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An opaque type representing target information for a given translation
|
||
|
* unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct CXTargetInfoImpl *CXTargetInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
|
||
|
* to various callbacks and visitors.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXClientData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
|
||
|
* system along with the current contents of that file that have not
|
||
|
* yet been saved to disk.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This file must already exist in the file system.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const char *Filename;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const char *Contents;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
unsigned long Length;
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
|
||
|
* whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
|
||
|
* it being deprecated or unavailable.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXAvailabilityKind {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The entity is available.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXAvailability_Available,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
|
||
|
* not recommended).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXAvailability_Deprecated,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
|
||
|
* an error.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXAvailability_NotAccessible
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct CXVersion {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
|
||
|
* value indicates that there is no version number at all.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int Major;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
|
||
|
* will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
|
||
|
* version '10'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int Minor;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
|
||
|
* will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
|
||
|
* e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int Subminor;
|
||
|
} CXVersion;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the exception specification of a cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A negative value indicates that the cursor is not a function declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has no exception specification.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_None,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has exception specification throw()
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_DynamicNone,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has exception specification throw(T1, T2)
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Dynamic,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has exception specification throw(...).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_MSAny,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has exception specification basic noexcept.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_BasicNoexcept,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has exception specification computed noexcept.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_ComputedNoexcept,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The exception specification has not yet been evaluated.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unevaluated,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The exception specification has not yet been instantiated.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Uninstantiated,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The exception specification has not been parsed yet.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unparsed,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The cursor has a __declspec(nothrow) exception specification.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_NoThrow
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* It provides two options:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
|
||
|
* declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
|
||
|
* is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
|
||
|
* header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
|
||
|
* will be enumerated.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Here is an example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
|
||
|
* Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
|
||
|
* // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
|
||
|
* TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
|
||
|
* clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
|
||
|
* TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
|
||
|
* clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
|
||
|
* // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
|
||
|
* char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
|
||
|
* TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
|
||
|
* 0, 0);
|
||
|
* clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
|
||
|
* TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
|
||
|
* clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
|
||
|
* -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
|
||
|
* (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
|
||
|
int displayDiagnostics);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Destroy the given index.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
|
||
|
* within that index have been destroyed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
|
||
|
* purposes should use background priority.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
|
||
|
* #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
|
||
|
* purposes should use background priority.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
|
||
|
* #clang_annotateTokens
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
|
||
|
* background priority.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
|
||
|
CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
|
||
|
CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXGlobalOptFlags;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example:
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* CXIndex idx = ...;
|
||
|
* clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
|
||
|
* clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
|
||
|
* CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
|
||
|
* are associated with the given CXIndex object.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Sets the invocation emission path option in a CXIndex.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The invocation emission path specifies a path which will contain log
|
||
|
* files for certain libclang invocations. A null value (default) implies that
|
||
|
* libclang invocations are not logged..
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void
|
||
|
clang_CXIndex_setInvocationEmissionPathOption(CXIndex, const char *Path);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXFile;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
|
||
|
* across an indexing session.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
unsigned long long data[3];
|
||
|
} CXFileUniqueID;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file the file to get the ID for.
|
||
|
* \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
|
||
|
* \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
|
||
|
* otherwise returns 0.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given header is guarded against
|
||
|
* multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
|
||
|
* \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
CXFile file);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param tu the translation unit
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file_name the name of the file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
|
||
|
* or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
const char *file_name);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the buffer associated with the given file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param tu the translation unit
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file the file for which to retrieve the buffer.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param size [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the size of the buffer.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns a pointer to the buffer in memory that holds the contents of
|
||
|
* \p file, or a NULL pointer when the file is not loaded.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_getFileContents(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
CXFile file, size_t *size);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
|
||
|
* or they are both NULL.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the real path name of \c file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* An empty string may be returned. Use \c clang_getFileName() in that case.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_File_tryGetRealPathName(CXFile file);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
|
||
|
* great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
|
||
|
* the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
|
||
|
* used to represent source location information, either for a particular
|
||
|
* point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
|
||
|
* specific location information from those data types.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Identifies a specific source location within a translation
|
||
|
* unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
|
||
|
* to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const void *ptr_data[2];
|
||
|
unsigned int_data;
|
||
|
} CXSourceLocation;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
|
||
|
* starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const void *ptr_data[2];
|
||
|
unsigned begin_int_data;
|
||
|
unsigned end_int_data;
|
||
|
} CXSourceRange;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
|
||
|
* the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
|
||
|
* code.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
|
||
|
* if they refer to different locations.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
|
||
|
CXSourceLocation loc2);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
|
||
|
* in a particular translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
CXFile file, unsigned line,
|
||
|
unsigned column);
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
|
||
|
* in a particular translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
CXFile file,
|
||
|
unsigned offset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
|
||
|
* the corresponding translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
|
||
|
* locations.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
|
||
|
CXSourceLocation end);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
|
||
|
CXSourceRange range2);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
|
||
|
* the given source location.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
|
||
|
* location of the macro expansion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
|
||
|
* into its parts.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
|
||
|
* buffer to which the given source location points.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
|
||
|
CXFile *file, unsigned *line,
|
||
|
unsigned *column,
|
||
|
unsigned *offset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the file, line and column represented by the given source
|
||
|
* location, as specified in a # line directive.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* #123 "dummy.c" 1
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* static int func(void)
|
||
|
* {
|
||
|
* return 0;
|
||
|
* }
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* the location information returned by this function would be
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
|
||
|
* into its parts.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
|
||
|
* source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
|
||
|
* which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
|
||
|
* parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
|
||
|
* a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
|
||
|
* using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
|
||
|
* source location, an empty string is returned.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
|
||
|
* source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
|
||
|
* source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
|
||
|
CXString *filename,
|
||
|
unsigned *line, unsigned *column);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
|
||
|
* by the given source location.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
|
||
|
* #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
|
||
|
* details.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
|
||
|
CXFile *file, unsigned *line,
|
||
|
unsigned *column,
|
||
|
unsigned *offset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
|
||
|
* the given source location.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
|
||
|
* location was originally spelled in the source file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
|
||
|
* into its parts.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
|
||
|
* buffer to which the given source location points.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
|
||
|
CXFile *file, unsigned *line,
|
||
|
unsigned *column,
|
||
|
unsigned *offset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
|
||
|
* the given source location.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
|
||
|
* expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
|
||
|
* a macro argument.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
|
||
|
* into its parts.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
|
||
|
* source location points.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
|
||
|
* buffer to which the given source location points.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
|
||
|
CXFile *file, unsigned *line,
|
||
|
unsigned *column, unsigned *offset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
|
||
|
* source range.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
|
||
|
* source range.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Identifies an array of ranges.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
/** The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
|
||
|
unsigned count;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSourceRange *ranges;
|
||
|
} CXSourceRangeList;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
|
||
|
* if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
CXFile file);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve all ranges from all files that were skipped by the
|
||
|
* preprocessor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
|
||
|
* if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *
|
||
|
clang_getAllSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
|
||
|
* option.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
|
||
|
* previous (non-note) diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
|
||
|
* wrong.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
|
||
|
* that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
|
||
|
* results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
|
||
|
* location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A group of CXDiagnostics.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
|
||
|
* \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
|
||
|
* via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
|
||
|
unsigned Index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
|
||
|
* \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that no error occurred.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
|
||
|
* deserialize diagnostics.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
|
||
|
* could not be opened.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
|
||
|
* corrupt.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
|
||
|
* file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
|
||
|
* \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
|
||
|
* deserializing the diagnostics.
|
||
|
* \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
|
||
|
* if the file was not successfully loaded.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
|
||
|
* diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(
|
||
|
const char *file, enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error, CXString *errorString);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
|
||
|
* clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
|
||
|
* translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Unit the translation unit to query.
|
||
|
* \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
|
||
|
* via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
|
||
|
unsigned Index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
|
||
|
* translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Unit the translation unit to query.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
|
||
|
clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Destroy a diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Options to control the display of diagnostics.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
|
||
|
* behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Display the source-location information where the
|
||
|
* diagnostic was located.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
|
||
|
* (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If displaying the source-location information of the
|
||
|
* diagnostic, also include the column number.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If displaying the source-location information of the
|
||
|
* diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
|
||
|
* machine-parsable format.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This option corresponds to the clang flag
|
||
|
* \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
|
||
|
* after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
|
||
|
* \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
|
||
|
* This option corresponds to the clang flag
|
||
|
* \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
|
||
|
* This option corresponds to the clang flag
|
||
|
* \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
|
||
|
* the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
|
||
|
* \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
|
||
|
* options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
|
||
|
* created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
|
||
|
unsigned Options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
|
||
|
* default behavior of the clang compiler.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
|
||
|
* clang_formatDiagnostic().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
|
||
|
clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
|
||
|
* displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
|
||
|
* diagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
|
||
|
* diagnostic (if any).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
|
||
|
* warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
|
||
|
CXString *Disable);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
|
||
|
* diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
|
||
|
* retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
|
||
|
* if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
|
||
|
* is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
|
||
|
* instead.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
|
||
|
* \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
|
||
|
clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
|
||
|
* diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
|
||
|
* code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
|
||
|
* underlining them with '~' characters.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the requested source range.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
|
||
|
unsigned Range);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
|
||
|
* given diagnostic.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
|
||
|
* should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
|
||
|
* three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
|
||
|
* the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
|
||
|
* replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
|
||
|
* replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
|
||
|
* insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
|
||
|
* insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
|
||
|
* insert).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
|
||
|
* replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
|
||
|
* ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
|
||
|
* replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
|
||
|
* code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic Diagnostic, unsigned FixIt, CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
|
||
|
* translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
|
||
|
* by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get the original translation unit source file name.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
|
||
|
clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
|
||
|
* command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
|
||
|
* NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
|
||
|
* specified command line arguments.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
|
||
|
* are ignored:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* '-c'
|
||
|
* '-emit-ast'
|
||
|
* '-fsyntax-only'
|
||
|
* '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
|
||
|
* associated.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
|
||
|
* source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
|
||
|
* \p clang_command_line_args.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
|
||
|
* passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
|
||
|
* These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
|
||
|
* unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
|
||
|
* '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
|
||
|
* unsaved_files.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
|
||
|
* but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
|
||
|
* those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
|
||
|
* CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
|
||
|
* guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
|
||
|
CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, int num_clang_command_line_args,
|
||
|
const char *const *clang_command_line_args, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
|
||
|
* the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
|
||
|
* routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
|
||
|
* error codes.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
|
||
|
clang_createTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
|
||
|
* \c CXTranslationUnit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
|
||
|
clang_createTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename,
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Flags that control the creation of translation units.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
|
||
|
* ORed together to specify which options should be used when
|
||
|
* constructing the translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
|
||
|
* needed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
|
||
|
* preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
|
||
|
* and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
|
||
|
* is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
|
||
|
* applications that require more detailed information about the
|
||
|
* behavior of the preprocessor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
|
||
|
* analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
|
||
|
* translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
|
||
|
* the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
|
||
|
* instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
|
||
|
* C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
|
||
|
* intent of producing a precompiled header.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
|
||
|
* implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
|
||
|
* particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
|
||
|
* when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
|
||
|
* implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
|
||
|
* initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
|
||
|
* the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
|
||
|
* preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
|
||
|
* clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
|
||
|
* precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
|
||
|
* code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
|
||
|
* introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
|
||
|
* code-completion operations.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
|
||
|
* \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
|
||
|
* producing a precompiled header.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
|
||
|
* we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
|
||
|
* parsing.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
|
||
|
* ignoring the usages.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
|
||
|
* included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
|
||
|
* unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on
|
||
|
* the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This
|
||
|
* trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for
|
||
|
* reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit,
|
||
|
* semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common
|
||
|
* source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the
|
||
|
* purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information
|
||
|
* as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Sets the preprocessor in a mode for parsing a single file only.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_SingleFileParse = 0x400,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used in combination with CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies to
|
||
|
* constrain the skipping of function bodies to the preamble.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The function bodies of the main file are not skipped.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_LimitSkipFunctionBodiesToPreamble = 0x800,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that attributed types should be included in CXType.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_IncludeAttributedTypes = 0x1000,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that implicit attributes should be visited.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_VisitImplicitAttributes = 0x2000,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that non-errors from included files should be ignored.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If set, clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() will not report e.g. warnings from
|
||
|
* included files anymore. This speeds up clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() for
|
||
|
* the case where these warnings are not of interest, as for an IDE for
|
||
|
* example, which typically shows only the diagnostics in the main file.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_IgnoreNonErrorsFromIncludedFiles = 0x4000,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Tells the preprocessor not to skip excluded conditional blocks.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit_RetainExcludedConditionalBlocks = 0x8000
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
|
||
|
* unit that is being edited.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
|
||
|
* to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
|
||
|
* either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
|
||
|
* (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
|
||
|
* set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
|
||
|
* preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
|
||
|
* set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
|
||
|
* the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
|
||
|
* routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
|
||
|
* error codes.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_parseTranslationUnit(
|
||
|
CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
|
||
|
const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
|
||
|
* to that file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
|
||
|
* ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
|
||
|
* queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
|
||
|
* command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
|
||
|
* way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
|
||
|
* associated.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
|
||
|
* source file is included in \c command_line_args.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
|
||
|
* passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
|
||
|
* These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
|
||
|
* unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
|
||
|
* '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
|
||
|
* \c command_line_args.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
|
||
|
* but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
|
||
|
* those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
|
||
|
* CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
|
||
|
* guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
|
||
|
* unsaved_files.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
|
||
|
* is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
|
||
|
* CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
|
||
|
* \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
|
||
|
* diagnostics produced by the compiler.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2(
|
||
|
CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
|
||
|
const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
|
||
|
* for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
|
||
|
* library paths are relative to the binary.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
|
||
|
CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
|
||
|
const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Flags that control how translation units are saved.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
|
||
|
* ORed together to specify which options should be used when
|
||
|
* saving the translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
|
||
|
* unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The set of flags returned provide options for
|
||
|
* \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
|
||
|
* set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
|
||
|
* the most commonly-requested data.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
|
||
|
* \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXSaveError {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSaveError_None = 0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
|
||
|
* the file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
|
||
|
* write the file.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
|
||
|
* to save the translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
|
||
|
* extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
|
||
|
* invalid (e.g., NULL).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
|
||
|
* that translation unit on disk.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
|
||
|
* into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
|
||
|
* new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
|
||
|
* if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
|
||
|
* header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
|
||
|
* units.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU The translation unit to save.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
|
||
|
* is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
|
||
|
* CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
|
||
|
* enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
|
||
|
* saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
|
||
|
const char *FileName,
|
||
|
unsigned options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Suspend a translation unit in order to free memory associated with it.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A suspended translation unit uses significantly less memory but on the other
|
||
|
* side does not support any other calls than \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit
|
||
|
* to resume it or \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit to dispose it completely.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_suspendTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
|
||
|
* ORed together to specify which options should be used when
|
||
|
* reparsing the translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXReparse_Flags {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXReparse_None = 0x0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
|
||
|
* unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The set of flags returned provide options for
|
||
|
* \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
|
||
|
* set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
|
||
|
* of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
|
||
|
* to the next.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
|
||
|
* created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
|
||
|
* have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
|
||
|
* source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
|
||
|
* was originally parsed.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
|
||
|
* that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
|
||
|
* unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
|
||
|
* creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
|
||
|
* However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
|
||
|
* unit using this routine.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
|
||
|
* translation unit must originally have been built with
|
||
|
* \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
|
||
|
* unsaved_files.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
|
||
|
* but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
|
||
|
* those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
|
||
|
* CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
|
||
|
* guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
|
||
|
* The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
|
||
|
* options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
|
||
|
* returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
|
||
|
* invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
|
||
|
* \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
|
||
|
* routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int
|
||
|
clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
|
||
|
* the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
|
||
|
/* The memory usage category. */
|
||
|
enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
|
||
|
/* Amount of resources used.
|
||
|
The units will depend on the resource kind. */
|
||
|
unsigned long amount;
|
||
|
} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
|
||
|
/* Private data member, used for queries. */
|
||
|
void *data;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
|
||
|
unsigned numEntries;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
|
||
|
usage. */
|
||
|
CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXTUResourceUsage;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
|
||
|
* should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage
|
||
|
clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get target information for this translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The CXTargetInfo object cannot outlive the CXTranslationUnit object.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTargetInfo
|
||
|
clang_getTranslationUnitTargetInfo(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Destroy the CXTargetInfo object.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_TargetInfo_dispose(CXTargetInfo Info);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get the normalized target triple as a string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Returns the empty string in case of any error.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_TargetInfo_getTriple(CXTargetInfo Info);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get the pointer width of the target in bits.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Returns -1 in case of error.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_TargetInfo_getPointerWidth(CXTargetInfo Info);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCursorKind {
|
||
|
/* Declarations */
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
|
||
|
* interface.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
|
||
|
* of declaration; one can extract their location information,
|
||
|
* spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
|
||
|
* of the declaration is not reported.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
|
||
|
/** A C or C++ struct. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
|
||
|
/** A C or C++ union. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
|
||
|
/** A C++ class. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
|
||
|
/** An enumeration. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
|
||
|
* struct, union, or C++ class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
|
||
|
/** An enumerator constant. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
|
||
|
/** A function. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
|
||
|
/** A variable. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
|
||
|
/** A function or method parameter. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@interface. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C instance variable. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C instance method. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C class method. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@implementation. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
|
||
|
/** A typedef. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
|
||
|
/** A C++ class method. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
|
||
|
/** A C++ namespace. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
|
||
|
/** A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
|
||
|
/** A C++ constructor. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
|
||
|
/** A C++ destructor. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
|
||
|
/** A C++ conversion function. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
|
||
|
/** A C++ template type parameter. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
|
||
|
/** A C++ non-type template parameter. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
|
||
|
/** A C++ template template parameter. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
|
||
|
/** A C++ function template. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
|
||
|
/** A C++ class template. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
|
||
|
/** A C++ class template partial specialization. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
|
||
|
/** A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
|
||
|
/** A C++ using directive. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
|
||
|
/** A C++ using declaration. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
|
||
|
/** A C++ alias declaration */
|
||
|
CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
|
||
|
/** An access specifier. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* References */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a type declaration.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
|
||
|
* declared. For example, given:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* typedef unsigned size_type;
|
||
|
* size_type size;
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
|
||
|
* while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
|
||
|
* referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a class template, function template, template
|
||
|
* template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
|
||
|
* some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a labeled statement.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
|
||
|
* goto statement in the following example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* start_over:
|
||
|
* ++counter;
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* goto start_over;
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
|
||
|
* that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
|
||
|
* a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* struct X { ... };
|
||
|
* void swap(X&, X&);
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* template<typename T>
|
||
|
* void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
|
||
|
* while (first < last - 1) {
|
||
|
* swap(*first, *--last);
|
||
|
* ++first;
|
||
|
* }
|
||
|
* }
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* struct Y { };
|
||
|
* void swap(Y&, Y&);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
|
||
|
* reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
|
||
|
* "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
|
||
|
* instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
|
||
|
* argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
|
||
|
* example).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
|
||
|
* \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
|
||
|
* referenced by this cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
|
||
|
* context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Error conditions */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
|
||
|
CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
|
||
|
CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Expressions */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
|
||
|
* interface.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
|
||
|
* of expression; one can extract their location information,
|
||
|
* spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
|
||
|
* expression is not reported.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
|
||
|
* as a function, variable, or enumerator.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
|
||
|
* class, Objective-C class, etc.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An expression that calls a function. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
|
||
|
object or class. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An expression that represents a block literal. */
|
||
|
CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An integer literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A floating point number literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An imaginary number literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A string literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A character literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
|
||
|
* alignof).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
|
||
|
* "x <= y".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Compound assignment such as "+=".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** The ?: ternary operator.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
|
||
|
* (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example: (int)f.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** [C99 6.5.2.5]
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents a C11 generic selection.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
|
||
|
* pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
|
||
|
* size and alignment as a pointer.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
|
||
|
* NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
|
||
|
* match the size of a pointer).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s static_cast<> expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s const_cast<> expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
|
||
|
* notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Example:
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* x = int(0.5);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents the "this" expression in C++
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
|
||
|
* assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
|
||
|
* "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
|
||
|
* e.g. "delete[] pArray".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits)
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@encode expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@selector expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
|
||
|
* Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
|
||
|
* expressions.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
|
||
|
* expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* template<typename F, typename ...Types>
|
||
|
* void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
|
||
|
* f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
|
||
|
* }
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
|
||
|
* pack.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* template<typename ...Types>
|
||
|
* struct count {
|
||
|
* static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
|
||
|
* };
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
|
||
|
* object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
|
||
|
* std::sort(x, x + N,
|
||
|
* [](float a, float b) {
|
||
|
* return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
|
||
|
* });
|
||
|
* }
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-c Boolean Literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.5, Array Section].
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Represents an @available(...) check.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Fixed point literal
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_FixedPointLiteral = 149,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.4, Array Shaping].
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPArrayShapingExpr = 150,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.6 Iterators]
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPIteratorExpr = 151,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenCL's addrspace_cast<> expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXAddrspaceCastExpr = 152,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_CXXAddrspaceCastExpr,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Statements */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
|
||
|
* interface.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
|
||
|
* statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
|
||
|
* children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
|
||
|
* reported.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A labelled statement in a function.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
|
||
|
* the following example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* start_over:
|
||
|
* ++counter;
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
|
||
|
* bodies.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A case statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A default statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An if statement
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A switch statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A while statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A do statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A for statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A goto statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** An indirect goto statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A continue statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A break statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A return statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
|
||
|
CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's \@catch statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's \@finally statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's \@throw statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Objective-C's collection statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s catch statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s try statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++'s for (* : *) statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** A MS inline assembly statement extension.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
|
||
|
* expressions.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP SIMD directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP for directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP sections directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP section directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP single directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel for directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel sections directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP task directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP master directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP critical directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP taskyield directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP barrier directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP taskwait directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP flush directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP ordered directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP atomic directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP for SIMD directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP teams directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP taskgroup directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP cancellation point directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP cancel directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target data directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP taskloop directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP distribute directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target enter data directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target exit data directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target parallel directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target parallel for directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target update directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP distribute parallel for directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP distribute simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target parallel for simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP teams distribute directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeDirective = 271,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP teams distribute simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 272,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 273,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 274,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target teams directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDirective = 275,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target teams distribute directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeDirective = 276,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 277,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 278,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP target teams distribute simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 279,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** C++2a std::bit_cast expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_BuiltinBitCastExpr = 280,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP master taskloop directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopDirective = 281,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel master taskloop directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopDirective = 282,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP master taskloop simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 283,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel master taskloop simd directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 284,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP parallel master directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterDirective = 285,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP depobj directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPDepobjDirective = 286,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** OpenMP scan directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OMPScanDirective = 287,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPScanDirective,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
|
||
|
* cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Attributes */
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
|
||
|
* interface.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
|
||
|
CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
|
||
|
CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
|
||
|
CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
|
||
|
CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
|
||
|
CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
|
||
|
CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
|
||
|
CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
|
||
|
CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
|
||
|
CXCursor_DLLExport = 418,
|
||
|
CXCursor_DLLImport = 419,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NSReturnsRetained = 420,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NSReturnsNotRetained = 421,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NSReturnsAutoreleased = 422,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NSConsumesSelf = 423,
|
||
|
CXCursor_NSConsumed = 424,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCException = 425,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCNSObject = 426,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCIndependentClass = 427,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCPreciseLifetime = 428,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCReturnsInnerPointer = 429,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCRequiresSuper = 430,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCRootClass = 431,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCSubclassingRestricted = 432,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCExplicitProtocolImpl = 433,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCDesignatedInitializer = 434,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCRuntimeVisible = 435,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ObjCBoxable = 436,
|
||
|
CXCursor_FlagEnum = 437,
|
||
|
CXCursor_ConvergentAttr = 438,
|
||
|
CXCursor_WarnUnusedAttr = 439,
|
||
|
CXCursor_WarnUnusedResultAttr = 440,
|
||
|
CXCursor_AlignedAttr = 441,
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_AlignedAttr,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Preprocessing */
|
||
|
CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
|
||
|
CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
|
||
|
CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
|
||
|
CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
|
||
|
CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Extra Declarations */
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A module import declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
|
||
|
CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A static_assert or _Static_assert node
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* a friend declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_FriendDecl = 603,
|
||
|
CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
|
||
|
CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_FriendDecl,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A code completion overload candidate.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
|
||
|
* a translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
|
||
|
* program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
|
||
|
* etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
|
||
|
* Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
|
||
|
* a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
|
||
|
* cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
|
||
|
* clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
|
||
|
* from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
|
||
|
* translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
|
||
|
* to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
|
||
|
* source code into the AST.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
enum CXCursorKind kind;
|
||
|
int xdata;
|
||
|
const void *data[3];
|
||
|
} CXCursor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
|
||
|
* various declarations within the given translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given declaration is invalid.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A declaration is invalid if it could not be parsed successfully.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if the cursor represents a declaration and it is
|
||
|
* invalid, otherwise NULL.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalidDeclaration(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
|
||
|
* reference.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
|
||
|
* other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
|
||
|
* particular cursor refers to another entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
|
||
|
* cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
|
||
|
* unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/***
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
|
||
|
* element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/***
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
|
||
|
* unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXLinkageKind {
|
||
|
/** This value indicates that no linkage information is available
|
||
|
* for a provided CXCursor. */
|
||
|
CXLinkage_Invalid,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
|
||
|
* have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
|
||
|
/** This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
|
||
|
CXLinkage_Internal,
|
||
|
/** This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
|
||
|
* in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
|
||
|
CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
|
||
|
/** This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
|
||
|
CXLinkage_External
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
enum CXVisibilityKind {
|
||
|
/** This value indicates that no visibility information is available
|
||
|
* for a provided CXCursor. */
|
||
|
CXVisibility_Invalid,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** Symbol not seen by the linker. */
|
||
|
CXVisibility_Hidden,
|
||
|
/** Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
|
||
|
CXVisibility_Protected,
|
||
|
/** Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
|
||
|
CXVisibility_Default
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
|
||
|
* a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
|
||
|
* commandline arguments.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor The cursor to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The visibility of the cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
|
||
|
* taking the current target platform into account.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor The cursor to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The availability of the cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
|
||
|
clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
|
||
|
* a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A string that describes the platform for which this structure
|
||
|
* provides availability information.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Possible values are "ios" or "macos".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXString Platform;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The version number in which this entity was introduced.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXVersion Introduced;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
|
||
|
* still available).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXVersion Deprecated;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
|
||
|
* is no longer available.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXVersion Obsoleted;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int Unavailable;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
|
||
|
* suggest replacement APIs.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXString Message;
|
||
|
} CXPlatformAvailability;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
|
||
|
* on any platforms for which availability information is known.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor The cursor to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
|
||
|
* entity is deprecated on all platforms.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
|
||
|
* provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
|
||
|
* is responsible for deallocating this string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
|
||
|
* entity is unavailable on all platforms.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
|
||
|
* provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
|
||
|
* client is responsible for deallocating this string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
|
||
|
* that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
|
||
|
* the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
|
||
|
* returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
|
||
|
* \c availability array.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
|
||
|
* available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Note that the client is responsible for calling
|
||
|
* \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
|
||
|
* platform-availability structures returned. There are
|
||
|
* \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor, int *always_deprecated, CXString *deprecated_message,
|
||
|
int *always_unavailable, CXString *unavailable_message,
|
||
|
CXPlatformAvailability *availability, int availability_size);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void
|
||
|
clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If cursor refers to a variable declaration and it has initializer returns
|
||
|
* cursor referring to the initializer otherwise return null cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getVarDeclInitializer(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has global storage returns 1.
|
||
|
* If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have global storage
|
||
|
* returns 0. Otherwise returns -1.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclGlobalStorage(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has external storage
|
||
|
* returns 1. If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have
|
||
|
* external storage returns 0. Otherwise returns -1.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclExternalStorage(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXLanguageKind {
|
||
|
CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
|
||
|
CXLanguage_C,
|
||
|
CXLanguage_ObjC,
|
||
|
CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describe the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration
|
||
|
* referred to by a cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXTLSKind { CXTLS_None = 0, CXTLS_Dynamic, CXTLS_Static };
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration
|
||
|
* referred to by a cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTLSKind clang_getCursorTLSKind(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
|
||
|
* the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
|
||
|
* are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
|
||
|
* \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
|
||
|
* definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* class C {
|
||
|
* void f();
|
||
|
* };
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* void C::f() { }
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
|
||
|
* the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
|
||
|
* the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
|
||
|
* case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
|
||
|
* lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
|
||
|
* of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
|
||
|
* same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
|
||
|
* on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
|
||
|
* of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
|
||
|
* semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
|
||
|
* and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
|
||
|
* was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
|
||
|
* are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
|
||
|
* \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
|
||
|
* definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* class C {
|
||
|
* void f();
|
||
|
* };
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* void C::f() { }
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
|
||
|
* the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
|
||
|
* the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
|
||
|
* case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
|
||
|
* lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
|
||
|
* of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
|
||
|
* same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
|
||
|
* on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
|
||
|
* of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
|
||
|
* semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
|
||
|
* and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
|
||
|
* the translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
|
||
|
* method.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
|
||
|
* in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
|
||
|
* Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
|
||
|
* base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
|
||
|
* selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
|
||
|
* If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
|
||
|
* its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
|
||
|
* implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
|
||
|
* corresponding method in the interface.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
|
||
|
* function with the same signature that occurs in its base
|
||
|
* classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
|
||
|
* override several virtual member functions coming from different
|
||
|
* base classes.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
|
||
|
* method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
|
||
|
* a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
|
||
|
* (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
|
||
|
* then the only overridden method returned from this function when
|
||
|
* invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
|
||
|
* invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
|
||
|
* methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
|
||
|
* method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
|
||
|
* method overrides.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
|
||
|
* pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
|
||
|
* methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
|
||
|
* set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
|
||
|
* \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
|
||
|
* functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
|
||
|
* array pointed to by \p overridden.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
|
||
|
CXCursor **overridden,
|
||
|
unsigned *num_overridden);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
|
||
|
* clang_getOverriddenCursors().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
|
||
|
* cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
|
||
|
* routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
|
||
|
* described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
|
||
|
* both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
|
||
|
* location in the source code.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
|
||
|
* unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
|
||
|
* location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
|
||
|
* clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
|
||
|
* cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
|
||
|
* "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
|
||
|
* will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
|
||
|
* a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
|
||
|
* by the given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
|
||
|
* declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
|
||
|
* unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
|
||
|
* The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
|
||
|
* source code.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
|
||
|
* the given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
|
||
|
* first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
|
||
|
* ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
|
||
|
* declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
|
||
|
* the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
|
||
|
* entity was actually used).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the kind of type
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXTypeKind {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXType_Invalid = 0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
|
||
|
* interface.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXType_Unexposed = 1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* Builtin types */
|
||
|
CXType_Void = 2,
|
||
|
CXType_Bool = 3,
|
||
|
CXType_Char_U = 4,
|
||
|
CXType_UChar = 5,
|
||
|
CXType_Char16 = 6,
|
||
|
CXType_Char32 = 7,
|
||
|
CXType_UShort = 8,
|
||
|
CXType_UInt = 9,
|
||
|
CXType_ULong = 10,
|
||
|
CXType_ULongLong = 11,
|
||
|
CXType_UInt128 = 12,
|
||
|
CXType_Char_S = 13,
|
||
|
CXType_SChar = 14,
|
||
|
CXType_WChar = 15,
|
||
|
CXType_Short = 16,
|
||
|
CXType_Int = 17,
|
||
|
CXType_Long = 18,
|
||
|
CXType_LongLong = 19,
|
||
|
CXType_Int128 = 20,
|
||
|
CXType_Float = 21,
|
||
|
CXType_Double = 22,
|
||
|
CXType_LongDouble = 23,
|
||
|
CXType_NullPtr = 24,
|
||
|
CXType_Overload = 25,
|
||
|
CXType_Dependent = 26,
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCId = 27,
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
|
||
|
CXType_Float128 = 30,
|
||
|
CXType_Half = 31,
|
||
|
CXType_Float16 = 32,
|
||
|
CXType_ShortAccum = 33,
|
||
|
CXType_Accum = 34,
|
||
|
CXType_LongAccum = 35,
|
||
|
CXType_UShortAccum = 36,
|
||
|
CXType_UAccum = 37,
|
||
|
CXType_ULongAccum = 38,
|
||
|
CXType_BFloat16 = 39,
|
||
|
CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
|
||
|
CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_BFloat16,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXType_Complex = 100,
|
||
|
CXType_Pointer = 101,
|
||
|
CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
|
||
|
CXType_LValueReference = 103,
|
||
|
CXType_RValueReference = 104,
|
||
|
CXType_Record = 105,
|
||
|
CXType_Enum = 106,
|
||
|
CXType_Typedef = 107,
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
|
||
|
CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
|
||
|
CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
|
||
|
CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
|
||
|
CXType_Vector = 113,
|
||
|
CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
|
||
|
CXType_VariableArray = 115,
|
||
|
CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
|
||
|
CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
|
||
|
CXType_Auto = 118,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXType_Elaborated = 119,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* OpenCL PipeType. */
|
||
|
CXType_Pipe = 120,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* OpenCL builtin types. */
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dRO = 121,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRO = 122,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRO = 123,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dRO = 124,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRO = 125,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRO = 126,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRO = 127,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARO = 128,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARO = 129,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRO = 130,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRO = 131,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage3dRO = 132,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dWO = 133,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dArrayWO = 134,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dBufferWO = 135,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dWO = 136,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayWO = 137,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dDepthWO = 138,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthWO = 139,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dMSAAWO = 140,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAAWO = 141,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthWO = 142,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthWO = 143,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage3dWO = 144,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dRW = 145,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRW = 146,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRW = 147,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dRW = 148,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRW = 149,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRW = 150,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRW = 151,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARW = 152,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARW = 153,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRW = 154,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRW = 155,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLImage3dRW = 156,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLSampler = 157,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLEvent = 158,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLQueue = 159,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLReserveID = 160,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCObject = 161,
|
||
|
CXType_ObjCTypeParam = 162,
|
||
|
CXType_Attributed = 163,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMcePayload = 164,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImePayload = 165,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefPayload = 166,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicPayload = 167,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMceResult = 168,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResult = 169,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefResult = 170,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicResult = 171,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultSingleRefStreamout = 172,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultDualRefStreamout = 173,
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeSingleRefStreamin = 174,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeDualRefStreamin = 175,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXType_ExtVector = 176,
|
||
|
CXType_Atomic = 177
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the calling convention of a function type
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCallingConv {
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_C = 1,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86RegCall = 8,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_Win64 = 10,
|
||
|
/* Alias for compatibility with older versions of API. */
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = CXCallingConv_Win64,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_Swift = 13,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_AArch64VectorCall = 16,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
|
||
|
CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
enum CXTypeKind kind;
|
||
|
void *data[2];
|
||
|
} CXType;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
|
||
|
* language of the translation unit from which it came.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
|
||
|
* returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
|
||
|
* returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
|
||
|
* long long.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is
|
||
|
* returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of
|
||
|
* the cursor must be verified before calling this function.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
|
||
|
* long long.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is
|
||
|
* returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of
|
||
|
* the cursor must be verified before calling this function.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long
|
||
|
clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
|
||
|
* cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
|
||
|
* declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
|
||
|
* of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
|
||
|
* invalid cursor is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes the kind of a template argument.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
|
||
|
* element descriptions.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
|
||
|
/* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
|
||
|
CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
*Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
|
||
|
* template specialization.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
|
||
|
* declaration, -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
|
||
|
* template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
|
||
|
* void foo() { ... }
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* template <>
|
||
|
* void foo<float, -7, true>();
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The value 3 would be returned from this call.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
|
||
|
* template argument kind is returned.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
|
||
|
* template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
|
||
|
* void foo() { ... }
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* template <>
|
||
|
* void foo<float, -7, true>();
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
|
||
|
* respectively.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind
|
||
|
clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(CXCursor C, unsigned I);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
|
||
|
* function decl representing a template specialization.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
|
||
|
* template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
|
||
|
* is returned.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
|
||
|
* template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
|
||
|
* void foo() { ... }
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* template <>
|
||
|
* void foo<float, -7, true>();
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
|
||
|
* Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
|
||
|
unsigned I);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
|
||
|
* decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
|
||
|
* FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
|
||
|
* template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
|
||
|
* void foo() { ... }
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* template <>
|
||
|
* void foo<float, -7, true>();
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
|
||
|
* For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
|
||
|
unsigned I);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
|
||
|
* decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
|
||
|
* FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
|
||
|
* template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
|
||
|
* void foo() { ... }
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* template <>
|
||
|
* void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
|
||
|
* For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long
|
||
|
clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(CXCursor C, unsigned I);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
|
||
|
* zero otherwise.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the canonical type for a CXType.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
|
||
|
* a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
|
||
|
* type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
|
||
|
* for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
|
||
|
* without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
|
||
|
* different level.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is
|
||
|
* function like.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a
|
||
|
* builtin one.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an
|
||
|
* inline declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
|
||
|
* without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
|
||
|
* a different level.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
|
||
|
* without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
|
||
|
* different level.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the address space of the given type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getAddressSpace(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the typedef name of the given type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypedefName(CXType CT);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a function type.
|
||
|
* This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-function type is passed in, an error code of -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getExceptionSpecificationType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
|
||
|
* function type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
|
||
|
* parameters, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieves the base type of the ObjCObjectType.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is not an ObjC object, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCObjectBaseType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of protocol references associated with an ObjC object/id.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCProtocolRefs(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the decl for a protocol reference for an ObjC object/id.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is not an ObjC object or there are not enough protocol
|
||
|
* references, an invalid cursor is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Type_getObjCProtocolDecl(CXType T, unsigned i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of type arguments associated with an ObjC object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCTypeArgs(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a type argument associated with an ObjC object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is not an ObjC or the index is not valid,
|
||
|
* an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCTypeArg(CXType T, unsigned i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a given cursor.
|
||
|
* This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This only returns a valid result if the cursor refers to a function or
|
||
|
* method.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorExceptionSpecificationType(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
|
||
|
* otherwise.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
|
||
|
* an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
|
||
|
* -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the element type of an array type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the array size of a constant array.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a typedef is 'transparent' tag.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A typedef is considered 'transparent' if it shares a name and spelling
|
||
|
* location with its underlying tag type, as is the case with the NS_ENUM macro.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if transparent and zero otherwise.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_isTransparentTagTypedef(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
enum CXTypeNullabilityKind {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Values of this type can never be null.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeNullability_NonNull = 0,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Values of this type can be null.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeNullability_Nullable = 1,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether values of this type can be null is (explicitly)
|
||
|
* unspecified. This captures a (fairly rare) case where we
|
||
|
* can't conclude anything about the nullability of the type even
|
||
|
* though it has been considered.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeNullability_Unspecified = 2,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Nullability is not applicable to this type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeNullability_Invalid = 3,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Generally behaves like Nullable, except when used in a block parameter that
|
||
|
* was imported into a swift async method. There, swift will assume that the
|
||
|
* parameter can get null even if no error occured. _Nullable parameters are
|
||
|
* assumed to only get null on error.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeNullability_NullableResult = 4
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the nullability kind of a pointer type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTypeNullabilityKind clang_Type_getNullability(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
|
||
|
* \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
|
||
|
* \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
|
||
|
* a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXTypeLayoutError {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The type is an incomplete Type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The type is a dependent Type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The type is not a constant size type.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The Field name is not valid for this record.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The type is undeduced.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXTypeLayoutError_Undeduced = -6
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
|
||
|
* standard.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
|
||
|
* is returned.
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
|
||
|
* returned.
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the class type of an member pointer type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
|
||
|
* is returned.
|
||
|
* If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
|
||
|
* returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
|
||
|
* as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
|
||
|
* is returned.
|
||
|
* If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
|
||
|
* If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
|
||
|
* If the field's name S is not found,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the type that was modified by this attributed type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the type is not an attributed type, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getModifiedType(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Gets the type contained by this atomic type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If a non-atomic type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getValueType(CXType CT);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
|
||
|
* If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
|
||
|
* If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
|
||
|
* If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
|
||
|
* If the field's name S is not found,
|
||
|
* CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous
|
||
|
* tag or namespace
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
|
||
|
* declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymousRecordDecl(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the given cursor represents an inline namespace
|
||
|
* declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isInlineNamespace(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
enum CXRefQualifierKind {
|
||
|
/** No ref-qualifier was provided. */
|
||
|
CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
|
||
|
/** An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
|
||
|
CXRefQualifier_LValue,
|
||
|
/** An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
|
||
|
CXRefQualifier_RValue
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the number of template arguments for given template
|
||
|
* specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a template specialization.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
|
||
|
* at given index.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
|
||
|
* template template arguments or variadic packs.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T,
|
||
|
unsigned i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
|
||
|
* or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
|
||
|
* bitfield.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
|
||
|
* CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
|
||
|
* cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
|
||
|
CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
|
||
|
CX_CXXPublic,
|
||
|
CX_CXXProtected,
|
||
|
CX_CXXPrivate
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within
|
||
|
* its parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base
|
||
|
* specifier or access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
|
||
|
* was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CX_StorageClass {
|
||
|
CX_SC_Invalid,
|
||
|
CX_SC_None,
|
||
|
CX_SC_Extern,
|
||
|
CX_SC_Static,
|
||
|
CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
|
||
|
CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
|
||
|
CX_SC_Auto,
|
||
|
CX_SC_Register
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
|
||
|
* CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
|
||
|
* \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
|
||
|
* is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
|
||
|
* by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
|
||
|
* the cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
|
||
|
* \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
|
||
|
* associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
|
||
|
* returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
|
||
|
unsigned index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
|
||
|
* this function returns the collection element type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
|
||
|
* using cursors.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
|
||
|
* cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
|
||
|
* \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXChildVisitResult {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Terminates the cursor traversal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXChildVisit_Break,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
|
||
|
* the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXChildVisit_Continue,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
|
||
|
* the same visitor and client data.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXChildVisit_Recurse
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
|
||
|
* clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
|
||
|
* visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
|
||
|
* and its third argument is the client data provided to
|
||
|
* clang_visitCursorChildren().
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
|
||
|
* to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
|
||
|
CXCursor parent,
|
||
|
CXClientData client_data);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visit the children of a particular cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
|
||
|
* invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
|
||
|
* visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
|
||
|
* \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
|
||
|
* the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
|
||
|
* cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
|
||
|
* definition, have no children).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
|
||
|
* child of \p parent.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
|
||
|
* be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
|
||
|
* prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
|
||
|
CXCursorVisitor visitor,
|
||
|
CXClientData client_data);
|
||
|
#ifdef __has_feature
|
||
|
#if __has_feature(blocks)
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
|
||
|
* clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
|
||
|
* visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
|
||
|
* to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor,
|
||
|
CXCursor parent);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
|
||
|
* identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent, CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
|
||
|
* across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
|
||
|
* by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
|
||
|
* and associate declarations with their definitions.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
|
||
|
* by the given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
|
||
|
* entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
|
||
|
* compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
|
||
|
* one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(
|
||
|
const char *class_name, const char *category_name);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
|
||
|
clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
|
||
|
* the USR for its containing class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
|
||
|
CXString classUSR);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
|
||
|
* the USR for its containing class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
|
||
|
unsigned isInstanceMethod,
|
||
|
CXString classUSR);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
|
||
|
* for its containing class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
|
||
|
CXString classUSR);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
|
||
|
* Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
|
||
|
* Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
|
||
|
* pieces for each selector identifier.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
|
||
|
* than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param options Reserved.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(
|
||
|
CXCursor, unsigned pieceIndex, unsigned options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Opaque pointer representing a policy that controls pretty printing
|
||
|
* for \c clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXPrintingPolicy;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Properties for the printing policy.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* See \c clang::PrintingPolicy for more information.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty {
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_Indentation,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressSpecifiers,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTagKeyword,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeTagDefinition,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressScope,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressUnwrittenScope,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressInitializers,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantArraySizeAsWritten,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_AnonymousTagLocations,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressStrongLifetime,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressLifetimeQualifiers,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTemplateArgsInCXXConstructors,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_Bool,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_Restrict,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_Alignof,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_UnderscoreAlignof,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_UseVoidForZeroParams,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_TerseOutput,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_PolishForDeclaration,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_Half,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_MSWChar,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeNewlines,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_MSVCFormatting,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantsAsWritten,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressImplicitBase,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy_LastProperty = CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get a property value for the given printing policy.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_PrintingPolicy_getProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy,
|
||
|
enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Set a property value for the given printing policy.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void
|
||
|
clang_PrintingPolicy_setProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy,
|
||
|
enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property,
|
||
|
unsigned Value);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the default policy for the cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The policy should be released after use with \c
|
||
|
* clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXPrintingPolicy clang_getCursorPrintingPolicy(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Release a printing policy.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose(CXPrintingPolicy Policy);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Pretty print declarations.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Cursor The cursor representing a declaration.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Policy The policy to control the entities being printed. If
|
||
|
* NULL, a default policy is used.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The pretty printed declaration or the empty string for
|
||
|
* other cursors.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted(CXCursor Cursor,
|
||
|
CXPrintingPolicy Policy);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
|
||
|
* such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
|
||
|
* class template specialization.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
|
||
|
* entity that it references.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
|
||
|
* Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
|
||
|
* This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
|
||
|
* cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
|
||
|
* definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
|
||
|
* Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
|
||
|
* of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
|
||
|
* that entity.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
|
||
|
* unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
|
||
|
* definition. For example, given:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* int f(int, int);
|
||
|
* int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
|
||
|
* int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
|
||
|
* int f(int, int);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
|
||
|
* second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
|
||
|
* function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
|
||
|
* (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
|
||
|
* that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
|
||
|
* declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
|
||
|
* declaration).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
|
||
|
* e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
|
||
|
* translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
|
||
|
* is also a definition of that entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
|
||
|
* times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
|
||
|
* be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* struct X;
|
||
|
* struct X;
|
||
|
* struct X {
|
||
|
* int member;
|
||
|
* };
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
|
||
|
* different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
|
||
|
* entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
|
||
|
* is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
|
||
|
* determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
|
||
|
* comparing their canonical cursors.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
|
||
|
* method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
|
||
|
* determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
|
||
|
* expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
|
||
|
* otherwise.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
|
||
|
* message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
|
||
|
* For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
|
||
|
* or a specific class.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
|
||
|
* method/message, it will return zero.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message or property
|
||
|
* reference, or C++ method call, returns the CXType of the receiver.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800,
|
||
|
CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000
|
||
|
} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
|
||
|
* associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
|
||
|
* \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C, unsigned reserved);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
|
||
|
* name of the method that implements the getter.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyGetterName(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
|
||
|
* name of the method that implements the setter, if any.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertySetterName(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
|
||
|
* Objective-C method declarations.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
|
||
|
CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
|
||
|
} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
|
||
|
* declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
|
||
|
* type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
|
||
|
* CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
|
||
|
* declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "\@optional".
|
||
|
* Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "\@required".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns non-zero if the given cursor points to a symbol marked with
|
||
|
* external_source_symbol attribute.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param language If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to
|
||
|
* the 'language' string from the attribute.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param definedIn If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to
|
||
|
* the 'definedIn' string from the attribute.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param isGenerated If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to
|
||
|
* non-zero if the 'generated_declaration' is set in the attribute.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isExternalSymbol(CXCursor C,
|
||
|
CXString *language,
|
||
|
CXString *definedIn,
|
||
|
unsigned *isGenerated);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
|
||
|
* comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
|
||
|
* with whitespace in between.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
|
||
|
* comment text, including comment markers.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
|
||
|
* declaration), return the associated \paragraph; otherwise return the
|
||
|
* first paragraph.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
|
||
|
* constructor or destructor at the cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the ObjC
|
||
|
* class interface or implementation at the cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getObjCManglings(CXCursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef void *CXModule;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
|
||
|
* exists.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
|
||
|
* e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
|
||
|
* will return "vector".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
|
||
|
CXModule Module);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \param Module a module object.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit, CXModule Module,
|
||
|
unsigned Index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
|
||
|
* to C++ language features.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
|
||
|
* pure virtual.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
|
||
|
* declared 'static'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
|
||
|
* explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
|
||
|
* one of the base classes.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ record is abstract, i.e. whether a class or struct
|
||
|
* has a pure virtual member function.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXRecord_isAbstract(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if an enum declaration refers to a scoped enum.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EnumDecl_isScoped(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
|
||
|
* declared 'const'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
|
||
|
* the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
|
||
|
* the template.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
|
||
|
* class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
|
||
|
* cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
|
||
|
* declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
|
||
|
* declaration.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
|
||
|
* by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
|
||
|
* \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
|
||
|
* of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
|
||
|
* specializes or from which it was instantiated.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
|
||
|
* specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
|
||
|
* both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
|
||
|
* specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
|
||
|
* either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
|
||
|
* instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
|
||
|
* partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
|
||
|
* function template specialization (including instantiations), this
|
||
|
* this routine will return the specialized template.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
|
||
|
* static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
|
||
|
* Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
|
||
|
* templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
|
||
|
* templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
|
||
|
* of a template.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
|
||
|
* template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
|
||
|
* from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
|
||
|
* covering that reference.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
|
||
|
* an operator call.
|
||
|
* \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
|
||
|
* CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
|
||
|
* CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
|
||
|
* \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
|
||
|
* CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
|
||
|
* available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
|
||
|
* non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
|
||
|
* pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
|
||
|
* name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(
|
||
|
CXCursor C, unsigned NameFlags, unsigned PieceIndex);
|
||
|
|
||
|
enum CXNameRefFlags {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
|
||
|
* range.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
|
||
|
* in the range.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
|
||
|
* parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
|
||
|
* return some_vector[1]; // C++
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
|
||
|
* translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
|
||
|
* their corresponding cursors.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes a kind of token.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum CXTokenKind {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXToken_Punctuation,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A language keyword.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXToken_Keyword,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An identifier (that is not a keyword).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXToken_Identifier,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A numeric, string, or character literal.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXToken_Literal,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A comment.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXToken_Comment
|
||
|
} CXTokenKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes a single preprocessing token.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
unsigned int_data[4];
|
||
|
void *ptr_data;
|
||
|
} CXToken;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get the raw lexical token starting with the given location.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Location the source location with which the token starts.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The token starting with the given location or NULL if no such token
|
||
|
* exist. The returned pointer must be freed with clang_disposeTokens before the
|
||
|
* translation unit is destroyed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXToken *clang_getToken(CXTranslationUnit TU,
|
||
|
CXSourceLocation Location);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the kind of the given token.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the spelling of the given token.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
|
||
|
* the text of an identifier or keyword.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the source location of the given token.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
|
||
|
CXToken);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
|
||
|
* lexical tokens.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
|
||
|
* tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
|
||
|
* that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
|
||
|
* freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
|
||
|
* array.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
|
||
|
CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
|
||
|
* that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
|
||
|
* clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
|
||
|
* tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
|
||
|
* cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
|
||
|
* accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
|
||
|
* clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
|
||
|
* * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
|
||
|
* * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
|
||
|
* annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
|
||
|
* and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
|
||
|
* part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
|
||
|
* not provided as an annotation.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
|
||
|
* replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens,
|
||
|
unsigned NumTokens, CXCursor *Cursors);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Free the given set of tokens.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens,
|
||
|
unsigned NumTokens);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
|
||
|
* be relied upon.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/* for debug/testing */
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(
|
||
|
CXCursor, const char **startBuf, const char **endBuf, unsigned *startLine,
|
||
|
unsigned *startColumn, unsigned *endLine, unsigned *endColumn);
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void *), void *user_data,
|
||
|
unsigned stack_size);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
|
||
|
* knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
|
||
|
* syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
|
||
|
* use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
|
||
|
* routines provide support for code completion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
|
||
|
* result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
|
||
|
* source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
|
||
|
* Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
|
||
|
* contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
|
||
|
* the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
|
||
|
* the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
|
||
|
* with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
|
||
|
* description of the different kinds of chunks.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXCompletionString;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A single result of code completion.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
|
||
|
* *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
|
||
|
* referring to.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
|
||
|
* the client to extract additional information from declaration.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
|
||
|
* code-completion result into the editing buffer.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionString CompletionString;
|
||
|
} CXCompletionResult;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
|
||
|
* either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
|
||
|
* should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
|
||
|
* could be a part of the template (but is not required).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
|
||
|
* string for its representation, which is accessible via
|
||
|
* \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
|
||
|
* describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
|
||
|
* For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
|
||
|
* arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The code-completion string for this function would contain:
|
||
|
* - a TypedText chunk for "f".
|
||
|
* - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
|
||
|
* - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
|
||
|
* - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
|
||
|
* - a Comma chunk for ","
|
||
|
* - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
|
||
|
* - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
|
||
|
* - a Comma chunk for ","
|
||
|
* - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
|
||
|
* - a RightParen chunk for ")"
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
|
||
|
* - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
|
||
|
* function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
|
||
|
* - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
|
||
|
* function "f" would have all of the parameters.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
|
||
|
* code-completion result.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
|
||
|
* will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
|
||
|
* declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
|
||
|
* expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
|
||
|
* chunk.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
|
||
|
* inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
|
||
|
* be selected.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Text,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
|
||
|
* into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
|
||
|
* the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
|
||
|
* user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
|
||
|
* text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
|
||
|
* the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
|
||
|
* part of the template.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
|
||
|
* help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
|
||
|
* right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
|
||
|
* by code completion.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
|
||
|
* referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
|
||
|
* information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
|
||
|
* code-completion point. For example, given a function
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* int add(int x, int y);
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
|
||
|
* "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
|
||
|
* for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
|
||
|
* parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
|
||
|
* point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
|
||
|
* "current parameter" chunk to "int y".
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
|
||
|
* signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
|
||
|
* signal the end of a function parameter list.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A left bracket ('[').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A right bracket (']').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A left brace ('{').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A right brace ('}').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A left angle bracket ('<').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A right angle bracket ('>').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A comma separator (',').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
|
||
|
* the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
|
||
|
* expression using the given completion string would have.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A colon (':').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A semicolon (';').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An '=' sign.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Horizontal space (' ').
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Vertical space ('\\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
|
||
|
* perform indentation.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string the completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
|
||
|
clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
|
||
|
unsigned chunk_number);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
|
||
|
* completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string the completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionChunkText(
|
||
|
CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
|
||
|
* within a completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string the completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
|
||
|
* \c chunk_number.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(
|
||
|
CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the priority of this code completion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
|
||
|
* particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
|
||
|
* priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string The completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
|
||
|
* higher-priority (more likely) completions.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
|
||
|
* string refers to.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string The completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The availability of the completion string.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
|
||
|
clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
|
||
|
* completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string the completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
|
||
|
* string.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string the completion string to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
|
||
|
* completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
|
||
|
* \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionAnnotation(
|
||
|
CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned annotation_number);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
|
||
|
* the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
|
||
|
* a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
|
||
|
* or protocol as its context.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
|
||
|
* being queried.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
|
||
|
* the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionParent(
|
||
|
CXCompletionString completion_string, enum CXCursorKind *kind);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
|
||
|
* that corresponds to the given completion string.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
|
||
|
clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
|
||
|
* definition cursor.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor The cursor to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
|
||
|
* definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
|
||
|
clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Contains the results of code-completion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
|
||
|
* produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
|
||
|
* \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The code-completion results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionResult *Results;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The number of code-completion results stored in the
|
||
|
* \c Results array.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
unsigned NumResults;
|
||
|
} CXCodeCompleteResults;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the number of fix-its for the given completion index.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Calling this makes sense only if CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts
|
||
|
* option was set.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param results The structure keeping all completion results
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_index The index of the completion
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \return The number of fix-its which must be applied before the completion at
|
||
|
* completion_index can be applied
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
|
||
|
clang_getCompletionNumFixIts(CXCodeCompleteResults *results,
|
||
|
unsigned completion_index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Fix-its that *must* be applied before inserting the text for the
|
||
|
* corresponding completion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* By default, clang_codeCompleteAt() only returns completions with empty
|
||
|
* fix-its. Extra completions with non-empty fix-its should be explicitly
|
||
|
* requested by setting CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* For the clients to be able to compute position of the cursor after applying
|
||
|
* fix-its, the following conditions are guaranteed to hold for
|
||
|
* replacement_range of the stored fix-its:
|
||
|
* - Ranges in the fix-its are guaranteed to never contain the completion
|
||
|
* point (or identifier under completion point, if any) inside them, except
|
||
|
* at the start or at the end of the range.
|
||
|
* - If a fix-it range starts or ends with completion point (or starts or
|
||
|
* ends after the identifier under completion point), it will contain at
|
||
|
* least one character. It allows to unambiguously recompute completion
|
||
|
* point after applying the fix-it.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The intuition is that provided fix-its change code around the identifier we
|
||
|
* complete, but are not allowed to touch the identifier itself or the
|
||
|
* completion point. One example of completions with corrections are the ones
|
||
|
* replacing '.' with '->' and vice versa:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* std::unique_ptr<std::vector<int>> vec_ptr;
|
||
|
* In 'vec_ptr.^', one of the completions is 'push_back', it requires
|
||
|
* replacing '.' with '->'.
|
||
|
* In 'vec_ptr->^', one of the completions is 'release', it requires
|
||
|
* replacing '->' with '.'.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param results The structure keeping all completion results
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param completion_index The index of the completion
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param fixit_index The index of the fix-it for the completion at
|
||
|
* completion_index
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param replacement_range The fix-it range that must be replaced before the
|
||
|
* completion at completion_index can be applied
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns The fix-it string that must replace the code at replacement_range
|
||
|
* before the completion at completion_index can be applied
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionFixIt(
|
||
|
CXCodeCompleteResults *results, unsigned completion_index,
|
||
|
unsigned fixit_index, CXSourceRange *replacement_range);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
|
||
|
* modify its behavior.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
|
||
|
* provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether to include macros within the set of code
|
||
|
* completions returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
|
||
|
* within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
|
||
|
* completions returned.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether to speed up completion by omitting top- or namespace-level entities
|
||
|
* defined in the preamble. There's no guarantee any particular entity is
|
||
|
* omitted. This may be useful if the headers are indexed externally.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCodeComplete_SkipPreamble = 0x08,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether to include completions with small
|
||
|
* fix-its, e.g. change '.' to '->' on member access, etc.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts = 0x10
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
|
||
|
* contexts are occurring simultaneously.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
enum CXCompletionContext {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
|
||
|
* should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
|
||
|
* should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
|
||
|
* be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
|
||
|
* should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
|
||
|
* included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
|
||
|
* operator should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
|
||
|
* operator should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
|
||
|
* using the dot operator should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
|
||
|
* included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
|
||
|
* the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
|
||
|
* in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
|
||
|
* the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
|
||
|
* the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
|
||
|
* in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
|
||
|
* the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
|
||
|
* the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
|
||
|
* the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Natural language completions should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* #include file completions should be included in the results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_IncludedFile = 1 << 22,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 23) - 1)
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
|
||
|
* passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
|
||
|
* column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
|
||
|
* code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
|
||
|
* for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
|
||
|
* performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
|
||
|
* been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
|
||
|
* to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
|
||
|
* current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
|
||
|
* semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
|
||
|
* returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
|
||
|
* user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
|
||
|
* code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
|
||
|
* is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
|
||
|
* after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is after the ">",
|
||
|
* the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
|
||
|
* "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
|
||
|
* beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
|
||
|
* based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
|
||
|
* the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
|
||
|
* the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
|
||
|
* client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
|
||
|
* showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
|
||
|
* is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
|
||
|
* results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
|
||
|
* have a lower latency.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
|
||
|
* occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
|
||
|
* completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
|
||
|
* be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
|
||
|
* translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
|
||
|
* completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
|
||
|
* included in the translation unit.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
|
||
|
* Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
|
||
|
* initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk
|
||
|
* but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
|
||
|
* contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
|
||
|
* specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
|
||
|
* client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
|
||
|
* this function returns.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
|
||
|
* unsaved_files.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
|
||
|
* completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
|
||
|
* CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
|
||
|
* \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
|
||
|
* of code-completion options.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
|
||
|
* containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
|
||
|
* freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
|
||
|
* completion fails, returns NULL.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXCodeCompleteResults *
|
||
|
clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU, const char *complete_filename,
|
||
|
unsigned complete_line, unsigned complete_column,
|
||
|
struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned num_unsaved_files, unsigned options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
|
||
|
* order.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Results The set of results to sort.
|
||
|
* \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
|
||
|
unsigned NumResults);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Free the given set of code-completion results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
|
||
|
* location where code completion was performed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Results the code completion results to query.
|
||
|
* \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
|
||
|
* via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
|
||
|
unsigned Index);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
|
||
|
* the given code completion.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Results the code completion results to query
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
|
||
|
* along with the given code completion results.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
unsigned long long
|
||
|
clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
|
||
|
* completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
|
||
|
* contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
|
||
|
* message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
|
||
|
* CXCursor_InvalidCode.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Results the code completion results to query
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
|
||
|
* information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
|
||
|
* information, this value will be true.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
|
||
|
* container
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
enum CXCursorKind
|
||
|
clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
|
||
|
unsigned *IsIncomplete);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
|
||
|
* context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
|
||
|
* function will return the empty string.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Results the code completion results to query
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the USR for the container
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
|
||
|
* send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
|
||
|
* non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
|
||
|
* CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param Results the code completion results to query
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
|
||
|
* for an Objective-C message send.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
|
||
|
* intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Enable/disable crash recovery.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
|
||
|
* value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
|
||
|
* (used with clang_getInclusions()).
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
|
||
|
* file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
|
||
|
* a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
|
||
|
* the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
|
||
|
* array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
|
||
|
* the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
|
||
|
CXSourceLocation *inclusion_stack,
|
||
|
unsigned include_len,
|
||
|
CXClientData client_data);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
|
||
|
* The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
|
||
|
* file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
|
||
|
* is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
|
||
|
CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
|
||
|
CXClientData client_data);
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXEval_Int = 1,
|
||
|
CXEval_Float = 2,
|
||
|
CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3,
|
||
|
CXEval_StrLiteral = 4,
|
||
|
CXEval_CFStr = 5,
|
||
|
CXEval_Other = 6,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXEval_UnExposed = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXEvalResultKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Evaluation result of a cursor
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXEvalResult;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the
|
||
|
* statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer,
|
||
|
* into its corresponding type.
|
||
|
* If it's an expression, tries to evaluate the expression.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the kind of the evaluated result.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the evaluation result as integer if the
|
||
|
* kind is Int.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the evaluation result as a long long integer if the
|
||
|
* kind is Int. This prevents overflows that may happen if the result is
|
||
|
* returned with clang_EvalResult_getAsInt.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_EvalResult_getAsLongLong(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns a non-zero value if the kind is Int and the evaluation
|
||
|
* result resulted in an unsigned integer.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the evaluation result as an unsigned integer if
|
||
|
* the kind is Int and clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt is non-zero.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long
|
||
|
clang_EvalResult_getAsUnsigned(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the evaluation result as double if the
|
||
|
* kind is double.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the
|
||
|
* kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer,
|
||
|
* instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned
|
||
|
* by clang_Cursor_Evaluate.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Disposes the created Eval memory.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E);
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXRemapping;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a remapping.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
|
||
|
* via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve a remapping.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param numFiles number of file paths.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
|
||
|
* via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
|
||
|
unsigned numFiles);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Determine the number of remappings.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
|
||
|
* is associated with.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
|
||
|
CXString *original,
|
||
|
CXString *transformed);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Dispose the remapping.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* @{
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
enum CXVisitorResult { CXVisit_Break, CXVisit_Continue };
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor {
|
||
|
void *context;
|
||
|
enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
|
||
|
} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Function returned successfully.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXResult_Success = 0,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXResult_Invalid = 1,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
|
||
|
* CXVisit_Break)
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXResult;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file to search for references.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
|
||
|
* each reference found.
|
||
|
* The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
|
||
|
* a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
|
||
|
* each directive found.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(
|
||
|
CXTranslationUnit TU, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifdef __has_feature
|
||
|
#if __has_feature(blocks)
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum CXVisitorResult (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor,
|
||
|
CXSourceRange);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
|
||
|
CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
|
||
|
CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
|
||
|
* of entities.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
|
||
|
* or module).
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Source location passed to index callbacks.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
void *ptr_data[2];
|
||
|
unsigned int_data;
|
||
|
} CXIdxLoc;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const char *filename;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXFile file;
|
||
|
int isImport;
|
||
|
int isAngled;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
|
||
|
* import.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int isModuleImport;
|
||
|
} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXFile file;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXModule module;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc loc;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
|
||
|
* a module import. Applicable only for modules.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int isImplicit;
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXIdxEntityKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityLang_Swift = 4
|
||
|
} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_Function
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
|
||
|
* CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
|
||
|
CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
|
||
|
} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
|
||
|
CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
|
||
|
CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
|
||
|
CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
|
||
|
} CXIdxAttrKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
CXIdxAttrKind kind;
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc loc;
|
||
|
} CXIdxAttrInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityKind kind;
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
|
||
|
const char *name;
|
||
|
const char *USR;
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
|
||
|
unsigned numAttributes;
|
||
|
} CXIdxEntityInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
} CXIdxContainerInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
|
||
|
CXCursor classCursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc classLoc;
|
||
|
} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum { CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1 } CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc loc;
|
||
|
const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
|
||
|
* cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
|
||
|
int isRedeclaration;
|
||
|
int isDefinition;
|
||
|
int isContainer;
|
||
|
const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
|
||
|
* by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int isImplicit;
|
||
|
const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
|
||
|
unsigned numAttributes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned flags;
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXIdxDeclInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
|
||
|
CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
|
||
|
CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
|
||
|
CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc loc;
|
||
|
} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc loc;
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
|
||
|
unsigned numProtocols;
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
|
||
|
const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
|
||
|
const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
|
||
|
CXCursor classCursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc classLoc;
|
||
|
const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
|
||
|
} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
|
||
|
const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
|
||
|
unsigned numBases;
|
||
|
} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This may be deprecated in a future version as this duplicates
|
||
|
* the \c CXSymbolRole_Implicit bit in \c CXSymbolRole.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
|
||
|
* via the dot syntax.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
|
||
|
} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Roles that are attributed to symbol occurrences.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Internal: this currently mirrors low 9 bits of clang::index::SymbolRole with
|
||
|
* higher bits zeroed. These high bits may be exposed in the future.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_None = 0,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Declaration = 1 << 0,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Definition = 1 << 1,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Reference = 1 << 2,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Read = 1 << 3,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Write = 1 << 4,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Call = 1 << 5,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Dynamic = 1 << 6,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_AddressOf = 1 << 7,
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole_Implicit = 1 << 8
|
||
|
} CXSymbolRole;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Reference cursor.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXCursor cursor;
|
||
|
CXIdxLoc loc;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* The entity that gets referenced.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \code
|
||
|
* Foo *var;
|
||
|
* \endcode
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
|
||
|
* For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
|
||
|
* the parentEntity will be the function/method.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Lexical container context of the reference.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Sets of symbol roles of the reference.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXSymbolRole role;
|
||
|
} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
|
||
|
* #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef struct {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
|
||
|
* Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data, CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data, CXFile mainFile,
|
||
|
void *reserved);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
|
||
|
const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
|
||
|
* the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
|
||
|
* file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
|
||
|
* the AST file.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
|
||
|
const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
|
||
|
void *reserved);
|
||
|
|
||
|
void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data, const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Called to index a reference of an entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
|
||
|
const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
} IndexerCallbacks;
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
|
||
|
clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
|
||
|
* container.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
|
||
|
clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
|
||
|
* container.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,
|
||
|
CXIdxClientContainer);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
|
||
|
clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *,
|
||
|
CXIdxClientEntity);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
|
||
|
* translation units.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef void *CXIndexAction;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
|
||
|
* translation units.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Destroy the given index action.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
|
||
|
* created within that index action have been destroyed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef enum {
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
|
||
|
* be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
|
||
|
* not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
|
||
|
* function-local symbols will be ignored.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
|
||
|
* If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
|
||
|
* indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
|
||
|
* Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
|
||
|
|
||
|
} CXIndexOptFlags;
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
|
||
|
* to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
|
||
|
* be passed to the invoked callbacks.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
|
||
|
* implements.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
|
||
|
* passed in index_callbacks.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
|
||
|
* performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
|
||
|
* reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
|
||
|
* recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
|
||
|
* a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(
|
||
|
CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
|
||
|
unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
|
||
|
const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
|
||
|
int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
|
||
|
* for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
|
||
|
* library paths are relative to the binary.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
|
||
|
CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
|
||
|
unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
|
||
|
const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
|
||
|
int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
|
||
|
unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
|
||
|
* #IndexerCallbacks.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
|
||
|
* when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
|
||
|
* -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
|
||
|
* -Diagnostic callback invocations
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
|
||
|
* non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(
|
||
|
CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
|
||
|
unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, CXTranslationUnit);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
|
||
|
* the given CXIdxLoc.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
|
||
|
* location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
|
||
|
* retrieves the location of the argument.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
|
||
|
CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
|
||
|
CXFile *file, unsigned *line,
|
||
|
unsigned *column,
|
||
|
unsigned *offset);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE
|
||
|
CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
|
||
|
* \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
|
||
|
* visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
|
||
|
* \c clang_Type_visitFields.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
|
||
|
* to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
|
||
|
CXClientData client_data);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* Visit the fields of a particular type.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
|
||
|
* invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
|
||
|
* visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
|
||
|
* the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
|
||
|
* field of \p T.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
|
||
|
* be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
|
||
|
* prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T, CXFieldVisitor visitor,
|
||
|
CXClientData client_data);
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
/**
|
||
|
* @}
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_END
|
||
|
|
||
|
#endif
|